Promaster city
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ......................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ......................................75
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...........................................119
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................181
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES ......................................................251
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE.......................................................281
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .........................................................325
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE .................................................331
10
INDEX..........................................................................337
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warnings and
Cautions.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S.
residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Cov-
ered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed
by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are miss-
ing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical sup-
port. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Informa-
tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle,
the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...............11
▫ Ignition Key Removal ....................11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key ................12
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder .................12
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................13
▫ Replacement Keys .......................13
▫ General Information .....................14
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .14
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................14
▫ To Arm The System ......................14
▫ To Disarm The System ....................15
▫ Security System Manual Override ............15
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ..................15
▫ To Unlock The Doors .....................16
▫ To Lock The Doors.......................16
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........16
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ..............16
▫ General Information .....................17
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ..........................18
▫ Locking The Doors From The Outside ........18
▫ Unlock The Doors From The Outside..........19
▫ Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The
Vehicle ...............................19
▫ Sliding Side Doors .......................20
▫ Child Lock System — If Equipped............20
▫ Auto Unlock Doors ......................21
䡵 WINDOWS .............................21
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped .............21
2
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................24
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR .....................24
▫ Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle .24
▫ Opening And Closing From The Inside ........25
▫ Child Lock System.......................25
▫ Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device ...........25
䡵 DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS ..............26
▫ Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From
The Outside ...........................26
▫ Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door
From The Inside ........................26
▫ Opening The Second Swing Door ............26
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........26
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........26
▫ Important Safety Precautions ...............27
▫ Seat Belt Systems .......................28
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .........38
▫ Child Restraints ........................50
▫ Transporting Pets .......................68
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .....68
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................69
▫ Transporting Passengers ...................69
▫ Exhaust Gas ...........................70
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ...............................70
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................72
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key
fob with an integrated key. To use the mechanical key,
simply push the mechanical key release button.
To order duplicate keys, please contact the authorized
dealer.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the STOP/OFF/LOCK position.
3.
Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Key Fob
1 – Key Blade Release Button
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 – Lock Button
4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, and re-
move the key fob from the vehicle. When leaving the
vehicle, always lock your vehicle. In case you switch
off the vehicle and the transmission is not in PARK
position, a warning message will appear on the
cluster which suggests you to shift the transmission
into PARK position and, then, you can remove the
key within 15 seconds. If 15 seconds expire, you have
to rotate the key from OFF/LOCK position to ON/
RUN position and come back to OFF/LOCK position
in order to remove the key.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of rea-
sons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door,
turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn the key
to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized ve-
hicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned to
the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a problem
with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a
Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sentry
Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys
with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle
Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
signals. Every intrusion attempt causes three continuous
alarm cycles. Every alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds. For 26
seconds, the horn will sound, and the turn signal lights will
flash. For four seconds, it will pause. After a maximum of
10 alarm cycles, only the turn signal lights will flash until
the next alarm activation.
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself after processing all the alarm cycles
related to the intrusion attempt. If the condition which
initiated the alarm is still present, the system will ignore
that condition and monitor the remaining doors and igni-
tion.
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the key
fob to lock the doors. If a door or the hood is not properly
shut, the alarm system will exclude the related door from
protection.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the system.
To exit the alarming mode, push the key fob unlock button
and open the door.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-
held key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may block the key
fob’s wireless signal.
Key Fob
1 – Key Blade Release Button
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 – Lock Button
4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
To Unlock The Doors
Cargo Vehicle (Canada) — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on key fob to unlock
the front two doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock
button on key fob to unlock the cargo area (side lateral
sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Cargo Vehicle (United States) — If Equipped
Push and release the unlock button on key fob to unlock all
doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button on key
fob to unlock the cargo doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Passenger Vehicle
Push and release the unlock button on key fob to unlock all
doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button on key
fob to unlock the cargo doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in this section for further informa-
tion.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw located
on the side of the key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key fob using
a small screwdriver.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Key Fob Screw Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside the
vehicle by using the door handle.
• To lock the doors, push down on the door handle.
• To unlock the doors, pull up on the door handle.
Locking The Doors From The Outside
Locking With A Key Fob
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Power Door Locks
Key Fob
1 – Key Blade Release Button
2 – Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 – Lock Button
4 – Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking With The Key Blade
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the doors exterior lock cylinder
and turn the key clockwise to lock the front door.
Unlock The Doors From The Outside
Unlocking With A Key Fob For All Passenger Vans and
US Cargo Vans (If Equipped)
To unlock all the doors, push and release the unlock button
on the key fob. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the unlock signal. Push and release the Cargo unlock
button to unlock the rear cargo doors only.
Unlocking With A Key Fob For Canadian Cargo Vans
(If Equipped)
Push and release the unlock button to unlock the front
doors. Push and release the Cargo unlock button to unlock
the side sliding doors and the rear cargo doors. To lock the
doors, push and release the lock button on the key fob. The
turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal.
Unlocking With The Key Blade
Push the Key Blade Release Button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the
all doors.
Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The
Vehicle
Pull up on the lock/unlock lever located on the drivers
door panel to the 1st detent to unlock all doors from inside
the vehicle.
Key Blade Released
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Sliding Side Doors
Unlocking With A Key Fob
Push and release the cargo unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the sliding side doors. To open one of the sliding
side doors, pull the handle out from the bottom, then slide
the door towards the rear of the vehicle until it locks into
place and cannot go any further. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Unlocking With The Key Blade
Push the key blade release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver exterior door lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all
doors.
Closing And Locking From Outside
Grab the side door handle and push towards the front of
the vehicle. Once the side door is secured in the full closed
position, reverse either of the unlocking modes above to
lock the sliding side doors.
Child Lock System — If Equipped
This system prevents the sliding side doors to be opened
from the inside.
It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked
remotely.
Child Lock System
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is
open.
NOTE: If the passenger door is open, only the passenger
door is unlocked. This procedure is the same for the rear
and side doors as well.
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control.
Power Window Switch Panel
1 – Rear Window Control Buttons – If Equipped
2 – Driver Passenger Window Control Buttons
3 – Passenger Window Lock Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: The key off power delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
The window opening mechanism is fitted with a security
system (if equipped) that can detect the presence of an
obstacle whilst the window is closing; when this happens,
the system activates and the movement of the glass is
immediately reversed.
If the presence of an object is detected and the system is
activated, it may be necessary to perform the reset proce-
dure by fully opening the windows.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Auto-Down Feature
The window switches are equipped with an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for a short period of time,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the Auto-Down motion part way, pull up/push
down on the window switch briefly.
NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay set-
ting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Open-
ing either of the vehicle’s front doors will cancel this
feature.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature
Lift the window switch to the detent for half a second,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, pull up/push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the detent for less than half a second and release it when
you want the window to stop.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Power Windows System Initialization
The power windows may be reset if any of the following
occurs:
• On the front doors
• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window is
moving.
• 20 window movements without ever closing the win-
dow.
• On the rear doors (in addition to the condition for the
front doors)
• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window is
moving.
• The anti-pinching system is activated while the win-
dow is moving and the door is opening.
• 50 window movements without ever closing the win-
dow.
• One door opening movements with the window mov-
ing, without ever closing the door.
• One door opening movement with the window mov-
ing, without ever closing the door.
Proceed as follows for initialization:
1. Completely close the driver’s door window, keeping the
operating button pushed for at least five seconds after
the (upper) end of travel position.
2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger’s side door
button and on the buttons of rear doors.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure
on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs open the front
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
On Cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted with a
spring-loaded latch that stops the door from opening any
further. To lock it, simply push the door as far as it will go;
to unlock it, pull forward firmly.
Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the Passenger
Vehicle and US Cargo Vehicle (If Equipped)
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock all doors.
Opening/Unlocking With A Key Fob In the Canadian
Cargo Vehicle (If Equipped)
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
the front two doors. Push and release the cargo unlock button
on the key fob once to unlock the passenger/cargo area (side
lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
Unlocking With The Key Blade
Push the key blade release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all
doors.
Closing/Locking With A Key Fob
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors, including the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors
and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock signal.
Locking With The Key Blade
Push the key blade release button to expose the key blade,
insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock
cylinder and turn the key clockwise to lock all doors.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Opening And Closing From The Inside
Opening:
Pull the interior door handle switch to unlock the door,
then pull the handle and slide the door towards the rear of
the vehicle until it can go no further.
Closing:
Pull the interior door handle switch to release the door and
then push it towards the front of the vehicle.
Child Lock System
This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened
from the inside.
The child locks can only be engaged/disengaged with the
sliding side door open:
The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked
remotely.
Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device
The sliding side doors are provided with a device for
locking all the doors using the lock in case of a power fault.
The device can be engaged with the sliding side doors
open as follows:
1. Key Emergency Lock Device not engaged (doors re-
leased)
2. Key Emergency Lock Device engaged (fit the ignition
key in its seat and rotate clockwise), door locked
The device is released and the doors can be opened as
follows:
If the power is restored:
• By remote control.
• Opening a front door by inserting the key into the key
pawl.
If the power is not restored:
• Opening the driver side door by key fob and the other
doors (passenger’s side and sliding side door) pulling
the inner handle.
If the child lock was engaged and the previously described
locking procedure was carried out, operating the internal
handle will not open the door but will only realign the door
lock knob. To open the door, the outside handle must be
pulled. The door central locking/unlocking button is not
disabled by the engagement of the emergency lock.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS
The rear double swing doors are fitted through a fastening
system which stops them when they reach an opening
angle of approximately 90 degrees.
To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees, push the
locking device (one on each side) and simultaneously open
the doors.
Using the key fob on the door, you can do the following:
• For Cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors: cen-
trally unlock the load compartment (sliding side doors +
rear swing doors/tailgate), centrally lock all the doors.
• For versions with swing door: local unlocking/locking.
Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The
Outside
To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push the cargo
unlock button on the key fob and then pull the exterior
handle to the left. To close the door, turn the key in the lock
or push the lock button on the key fob.
Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door From
The Inside
From inside the vehicle, use the interior door release
mechanism located on the left rear trim panel.
Opening The Second Swing Door
After having opened the first door, pull the handle located
on the door face toward the rear of the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer ser-
vice contact information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle
is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert
warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another
in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt
is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your
authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Adjustable Anchorage
Adjustable Anchorage
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Commercial Vehicle
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped
with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Commercial Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Passenger Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-
tion in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both
the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front
air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
(Continued)
Advanced Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger Knee
Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk
of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropri-
ate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side
impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle
during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protec-
tion. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy indepen-
dently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only
and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger com-
partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse
the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could com-
bine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-
facing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who
are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child
seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat
with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight
or height allowed by the child seat.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use
a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor-
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have
a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations (Passenger Vehicle)
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys-
tem once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center po-
sition using the inner LATCH lower anchor-
ages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower an-
chorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more in-
formation.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Second row all positions.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH :
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Tether Anchorage Locations
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1.
Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3.
Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint
to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Passenger Vehicle Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Second Row: The head restraints may be re-
moved from all positions.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating po-
sition with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1.
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle,
you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a family
vehicle and is not intended for carrying children in the
front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing child
restraints in this vehicle. Although the seat belt can be
locked to secure a child restraint, there are no tether
anchorages to complete the proper installation of a
forward-facing child restraint. If you must carry a child in
a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat should
be moved to the full rearward position and the child must
be in a proper restraint system based on its age, size and
weight. Follow the instructions below to secure the child
restraint using the seat belt.
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be secured in
the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger air bag.
In a collision, a passenger air bag may deploy causing
severe injury or death to infants riding in rear-facing
infant restraints.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped
with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then
letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is
locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for
additional information on ALR.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations For Front
Bucket Seats
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage (Commercial Vehicle)
This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage
located behind the front passenger seatback, near the floor.
When installing a forward-facing child restraint, always
secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.
1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether anchorage.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable head restraints, raise
the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
Tether Strap Installation
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints Systems” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer
for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................78
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......78
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................79
▫ Manual Folding Door Mirrors ..............79
▫ Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If
Equipped .............................80
▫ Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped ........80
▫ Sun Visors.............................81
䡵 SEATS ................................81
▫ Manual Seat Adjustments ..................82
▫ Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped ............84
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............85
▫ Head Restraints ........................86
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ...........89
䡵 LIGHTS ...............................91
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................91
▫ Headlights ............................91
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......92
▫ High Beams ...........................92
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................92
▫ Parking Lights .........................92
▫ Turn Signals ...........................92
▫ Lane Change Assist ......................93
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ...........93
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .............93
▫ Map/Dome/Lights ......................93
▫ Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamps ...............94
▫ Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamps ............95
3
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........96
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation ...........96
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...............98
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN .....98
䡵 SPEED CONTROL ........................99
▫ To Activate ...........................100
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................100
▫ To Deactivate .........................100
▫ To Resume Speed .......................100
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................100
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................102
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................102
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors ..........103
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts ...........103
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications . .104
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ..............................105
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions ...........................105
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ............................107
䡵 POWER OUTLETS .......................108
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED ............................110
䡵 CUPHOLDERS .........................110
䡵 STORAGE .............................111
▫ Glove Compartment .....................111
▫ Dash Storage .........................112
▫ Overhead Console Storage ................112
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES .................113
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs ...................113
▫ Rear Cargo Light .......................114
▫ Car
go Compartment Light — If Equipped .....115
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Manual Folding Door Mirrors
The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to be
folded rearward to help avoid damage.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car
wash or a narrow location.
Folding Mirrors
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If Equipped
From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever to
adjust the mirror.
Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the mirror flag
trim above the driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a mirror,
turn the control knob toward the left or right mirror
positions indicated. Tilt the control knob in the direction
you want the mirror to move. When you are finished
adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center (neutral)
position to prevent accidental mirror movements.
Manual Mirror Control Lever
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Driver Mirror Select Position
2 — Neutral Position
3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Your
vehicle may be equipped with courtesy mirror located on
the passenger sun visor.
“Slide-On-Rod” Of Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing it so it is parallel to the
side window. Then, slide the sun visor rearwards until it is
in the desired position.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Manual Seat Adjustments
The front driver and passenger seats can be adjusted
forward and rearward, and if equipped, may be reclined
and the height and lumbar can be adjusted.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjustment bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Seat Adjustments
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recliner Knob
4 — Lumbar Knob
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The height adjustment lever is located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push down on the front
lever to adjust the front of the seat up or down.
Recliner Adjustment — If Equipped
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, rotate the knob rearward without
leaning back. To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward, rotate the knob forward until the
seatback is in the upright position.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount
of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is located on
the rear upper outboard side of the seatback. Rotate the
control forward to increase and rearward to decrease the
desired amount of lumbar support.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat),
and lift it upward until the seatback releases.
2. Slowly fold down the seatback.
3. Pull forward on the lower release lever located on the
lower outboard side of seat and lift the seat for extended
cargo space.
Seatback Release Lever
Seat Release Lever
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Reverse order for original setting.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the lower outboard side of the seat.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. The LED
on the switch illuminates when the heated seat is on. Push
the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off.
Extended Cargo Space
Heated Seat Control Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
NOTE:
• This feature is only available with the ignition key in
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
located on the base of the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head re-
straint, and push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then
push the release button and the adjustment button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints can be removed by pushing
the release buttons, located at the base of the head restraint
and pull upward on the whole assembly.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
The center head restraint is adjustable and removable. To
raise the head restraint, push and hold the adjustment
button, located on the base of the head restraint and pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push and hold the adjustment button, and push downward
on the head restraint till the desired height is reached.
To remove the head restraint, push the release button and
adjustment button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly and raise it as far as it can go. To reinstall the
headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while
pushing the release button and adjustment button. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height.
Outboard Head Restraint Release Buttons
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver’s door.
Center Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Hood Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the
opening beneath the center of the hood and push up the
safety latch lever to release it, before raising the hood.
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood slot
to secure the hood in the open position.
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in close
position before closing the hood. Damage may occur.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
Hood Prop Rod
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
high beams, parking lights, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward
to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights, (if previously set through the menu) will
be deactivated.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE:
• The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on with
DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be on or
off through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
this feature can be programmed through the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, pull the multifunc-
tion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on the
high beams. A high beam symbol will illuminate in the
cluster to indicate the high beams are on. Pull the multi-
function lever a second time to switch the headlights back
to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or
turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the
detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times. Then, turn off automatically.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a
maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and
hold it for more than two seconds.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack
of the instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights
on. Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog
lights off.
Map/Dome/Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
corresponding switch.
Left Switch
• Push the left switch to the left to turn off the auto dome
lights. The dome lights will not automatically turn on
when a door is opened.
• Push the left switch to the right to turn on the dome
lights.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Right Switch
• Push the right switch to the left to turn on the left map
light.
• Push the right switch to the right to turn on the right
map light.
Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamps
Lateral Roof Light
This is located on the right side of the load compartment.
Rear Roof Light
This is located on the rear panel of the load compartment.
Map/Dome Lights
1 — Auto/Off 3 — Left Map
2 — Dome 4 — Right Map
Cargo Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations
1 — Lateral Roof Light
2 — Rear Roof Light
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In auto-mode the light comes on automatically when you
open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors and goes
out when you close them.
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off
when the doors are open.
• Push the right hand side of the lens to switch the light on
when the doors are open.
Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamps
The interior lamps are located in the center of the roof,
above the second row seating and in the roof in the center
of the rear load area.
Second Row Seating And Rear Roof Lights Operation
In auto-mode, the light comes on automatically when you
open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors and goes
out when you close them.
Lateral Roof Light
1—Off
2 — Auto
3—On
Passenger Vehicle Interior Lamp Locations
1 — Rear Roof Light
2 — Second Row Seating Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off
when the doors are open.
• Push the right-hand side of the lens to switch the light
on when the doors are open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
moved in several positions to access these modes.
Interior Light
1—Off
2 — Auto
3—On
Windshield Wiper Lever
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent
speed. When the vehicle’s speed increases, the time be-
tween the wipes will decrease.
Low Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second
detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers
will return to the off position and automatically shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate
automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
• In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is
not operating.
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front
window wiper) when the front window wiper is oper-
ating.
• In continuous mode while vehicle is in REVERSE.
With the windshield wipers on, and REVERSE gear en-
gaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in the same
way.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than quarter a second to activate the rear
window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper
lever will activate the smart washing function, as described
for the windshield wipers.
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever.
To unlock the steering column, push the control lever down-
ward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position,
pull the control lever up until fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle
set speed.
Speed Control Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed greater than 25 mph, push the SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph
(160 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense system provides an audible indication of
the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a de-
tected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
The ParkSense system is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from
an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert
becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The ParkSense system is automatically deactivated when a
trailer equipped by Mopar is hitched to the vehicle. The
system will be automatically activated as soon as the trailer
is removed. If it does not happen, turning the key ignition
switch to OFF and then to ON again would be needed. In
case of a non Mopar trailer hitches are mounted the sensor
deactivation cannot be guaranteed.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles,
in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the center of the rear
fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the loca-
tion, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense system
indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds
to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is
engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance
from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous
tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches
(30 cm) away.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present
within the sensors’ field of
view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the dis-
tance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level programmable through per-
sonal settings in the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
Failure Sensor or system failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on instrument cluster display
(if equipped).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition
occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after
three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers par-
allel to walls).
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense sensors or system is
indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the in-
strument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message is
displayed on the instrument cluster display (if
equipped). Refer to “Warning And Indicator
Lights” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated
immediately if they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall
indicate that the ParkSense system is unavailable, without
reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single
sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system
is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing
stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the
sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you
could damage the sensors.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction to keep the ParkSense Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense system.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
The Camera Delay setting can be set to on/off on the rear
camera settings menu. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE and the Camera Delay is turned off, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears on display again.
When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, and
Camera Delay is activated in the menu screen, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
unless the speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is in PARK, or the ignition key
is in the OFF position.
The display of the camera image can be enabled or
disabled through the rear camera setting menu item (Cam-
era on/off).
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of
the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
POWER OUTLETS
Passenger Compartment Power Outlets
The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in the
center console, and both operate with the ignition key in
the MAR (ON/RUN) position.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the left
side of the rear cargo compartment. It operates with the
ignition key in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. The
outlet can be used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accesso-
ries and recharging communications devices.
Passenger Compartment Power Outlets
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180W
to the outlet. Using unsuitable adaptors may damage
the outlet.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
Load Compartment Power Outlet Underhood Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #85 Fuse 15A Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V
2 — #86 Fuse 15A Blue IP Power Outlet 12V
3 — #30 Fuse 15A Blue 2nd IP Power Outlet 12V
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
Push the cigar lighter button to activate the cigar lighter
when the ignition key is in the MAR (ON/RUN) position.
After a few seconds the button returns to its initial position
and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
NOTE: Always check that the cigar lighter has turned itself
off.
WARNING!
The cigar lighter becomes very hot. Handle it carefully
and make sure children don’t touch it: risk of fire
and/or burning.
CUPHOLDERS
A cupholder is located in the front and rear of the center
console.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with a
lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the emer-
gency key from the key fob, insert emergency key into
glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn the key
to the lock position and remove the key. Use the reverse
sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel above the glove compartment.
Overhead Console Storage
There is additional shelf storage above the front sun visors.
Dash Storage
Overhead Console Storage Location
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
To make it easier to secure your load, there are hooks (if
equipped) fixed to the floor.
NOTE: Power washing is not allowed inside the cargo
area.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Cargo Version)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs (Passenger Version)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
Rear Cargo Light
In auto-mode the light comes on automatically when you
open the sliding doors and the rear wing doors and goes
out when you close them.
• Push the left-hand side of the lens to switch the light off
when the doors are open.
• Push the right hand side of the lens to switch the light on
when the doors are open.
Interior Light
1—Off
2 — Auto
3—On
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped
The cargo compartment light comes on automatically
when the swing doors are opened and turns off when the
doors are closed.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in
the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the
defroster off, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Cargo Compartment Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load
must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars built specifi-
cally for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in
use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately
24 inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can
then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward
or aft using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience inter-
ruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satel-
lite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over
the satellite radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your ve-
hicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do not
carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars
installed. The load should be secured and placed on
top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or some other protection between the load
and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...........121
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................122
▫ Instrument Cluster .....................122
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........124
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................124
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .......126
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ........133
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ...............133
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights .............141
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights..............148
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ...............150
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................150
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................152
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate .................153
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen ...............153
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
5.0 Settings ...........................153
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ....................164
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .164
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ............................165
▫ Radio Operation........................165
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .166
▫ General Information ....................166
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ....................166
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview...........166
▫ Operating Tips ........................171
4
䡵 UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED ..............174
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................174
▫ Get Started ...........................174
▫ Radio ...............................175
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................176
▫ Media ...............................177
▫ Phone ...............................177
▫ Voice Text Reply .......................178
▫ Additional Information ...................179
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Upper Dash Storage 13 — Climate Controls
2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights) 8 — Radio 14 — USB Charger/AUX
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 15 — Driver Air Bag
4— Horn 10 — Lower Dash Storage 16 — Uconnect Phone Buttons
5— Electronic Speed Control Switches 11 — Glove Compartment 17 — Gear Selector
6— Multifunction Lever (Front/Rear Wiper,
Trip Computer)
12 — Switch Bank
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the side
of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
Instrument Cluster
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster display menu may consist of the
following items depending on the configuration of vehicle
options:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• Autoclose
• Units
Instrument Cluster Display Location
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer
• Service
• Daylights
• Exit Menu
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the instrument
panel to the right of the steering column:
• MENU Button
Push and release the MENU button for a time longer than
1 second to access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the
MENU button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menu and submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and submenus.
Dimmer:
With headlights on and without entering in the menu, push
the up or down arrow button to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel, graphics and command
buttons.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant
setup menu.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu
option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
Speed Beep
This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or km/h);
the driver is alerted when this limit is exceeded.
To set the desired speed limit:
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will show
the wording (SPEED) and the unit (MPH) or (km/h)
previously set.
2. If the function is on, push and release the up or down
arrow button to select the required speed limit and then
push MENU to confirm.
NOTE: The speed may be set in the range from 20 to
125 MPH (30 to 200 km/h) according to the previously
chosen unit.
The setting will increase/decrease by five units each time
the up or down arrow button is pushed. Hold down the up
or down arrow button to automatically increase/decrease
the setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when you
approach the desired value.
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
To cancel the setting:
1. Briefly push the MENU button. “ON” will flash in the
display.
2. Push the down arrow button. “OFF” will flash in the
display
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B Data
This function can be used to activate (On) or deactivate
(Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip).
Refer to ⬙Trip Computer⬙ in this section for further infor-
mation.
To switch the function On/Off:
1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will flash
On or Off according to the previous setting.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Set Time
With this function, it is possible to set the time through two
submenus: ⬙Time⬙ and ⬙Mode⬙.
To set the time:
1. Push the MENU button; the display will show the two
submenus “Time” and “Mode”.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to switch
between the two submenus.
3. Select the required option and then push MENU.
4. If selecting the “Time” submenu, briefly push MENU,
the “hours” will flash on the display.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
6. Push the MENU button; the “minutes” will flash on the
display.
7. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
8. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the
up or down arrow button is pushed. Hold down the button to
increase/decrease the setting rapidly and automatically. Com-
plete the adjustment when you approach the desired value.
When you select “Mode”, pushing the MENU button
makes the mode flash on the display.
1. Push up or down arrow button to select ⬙24h⬙ or ⬙12h⬙.
2. When you have made the required settings, push the
MENU button briefly to go back to the submenu screen
or hold the button down to go back to the main menu
screen without saving.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
3. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the
standard screen or to the main menu according to where
you are in the menu.
Set Date
With this function, it is possible to set the date.
To adjust the date:
1. Push the MENU button; the “year” will flash on the
display.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
3. Push the MENU button; the “month” will flash on the
display.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
5. Push the MENU button; the “day” will flash on the
display.
6. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time
the up or down arrow button is pushed. Hold down the up
or down arrow button to increase/decrease the setting
rapidly and automatically. Complete the adjustment when
you approach the desired value.
Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu
screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the
standard screen without storing.
Autoclose
When activated (On), this function locks the doors auto-
matically when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h).
To activate or deactivate this function:
1. Push the MENU button briefly to display a submenu.
2. Push the MENU button briefly to make the display flash
On or Off according to the previous setting
3. Push the up or down arrow button to select.
4. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the submenu
screen or hold the button down to return to the main
menu screen without saving.
5. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the
standard screen or to the main menu according to where
you are in the menu.
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting The Units
With this function, it is possible to set the unit of measure-
ment in three submenus: “Distance”, “Consumption” and
“Temperature”.
To set the required unit of measurement:
1. Push the MENU button to display the three submenus.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to
navigate through the three submenus.
3. Select the required option and then push the MENU
button.
4. If selecting the ⬙Distance⬙ submenu, briefly push the
MENU button and the display will show “mi” or ⬙km⬙
depending on the previous setting.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
When you select the “Consumption” submenu: briefly
pushing the MENU button makes “mpg” or “km/l” ap-
pear on the display, depending on the previous setting.
1. If the set distance unit of measurement is ⬙mi⬙ (km) the
fuel consumption unit will be displayed in ⬙mpg⬙ (km/l
or l/100 km).
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
When you select the ⬙Temperature⬙ submenu: briefly push-
ing the MENU button the display will show ⬙°C⬙ or ⬙°F⬙
depending on the previous setting.
1. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
2. When you have made the required settings, push the
MENU button briefly to go back to the submenu screen
or hold the MENU button down to go back to the main
menu screen without saving.
3. Hold the MENU button down again to return to the
standard screen or to the main menu according to where
you are in the menu.
Language
Display messages can be shown in different languages. To
set the desired language, proceed as follows:
1. Push the MENU button, the previously set language
will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to select.
3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen or
hold the MENU button down to return to the standard
screen without storing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Buzzer Volume
With this function, the volume of the acoustic signal which
accompanies the display of failure/warning can be ad-
justed according to 8 levels.
To set the desired volume:
1. Push the MENU button, the previously set volume level
will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button to adjust.
3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen or
hold the MENU button down to return to the standard
screen without storing.
Service
Using this function you can display information about the
mileage intervals for vehicle servicing.
To consult the information:
1. Push the MENU button, which makes the display show
the service interval in mi or km according to the
previous setting.
2. Push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or
hold the MENU button down to go back to the standard
screen.
NOTE: The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle
maintenance at fixed intervals. Refer to “Maintenance
Schedules” for further information.
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cycle of settings
listed in the menu screen.
1. Pushing the MENU button briefly will return the dis-
play to the standard screen without storing.
2. Push the down arrow button to return to the first menu
item on the display.
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the instrument cluster display. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means
the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays information
such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average
speed, and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Range
• Trip distance A
• Average Economy A
• Instantaneous Economy
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
• Reset Trip A
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average Economy B
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
• Reset Trip B
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Economy” cannot be
reset. “Reset Trip A” and “Reset Trip B” may be present.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving condi-
tions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the
display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire
pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This value shows the approximate average fuel consump-
tion since the last reset.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a function
of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
This warning light appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum rec-
ommended value. Restore the correct engine oil level or contact your authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, which-
ever come first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Door Open Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the Instrument Cluster Display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains
after restarting the engine.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at
road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative.
The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2–6 gal (9–11 L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Generic Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Generic Warning Indicator Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure, Air
Bag Warning Light Fault (in this last case the Generic Warning Light will flash. If it happens,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately).
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Glow Plug Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Glow Plug Indicator Light
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit
engine cranking and this icon will blink when the ambient temperature is less than -31° F
(-35° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been
used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the
ambient temperature is below -25.6° F (-32° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly recognized, the vehicle security light comes on in
the instrument panel. In this case, turn the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is still locked,
try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still
cannot start the engine.
If with the engine running, the warning light comes on, this means that the system is running a
self-test (for example for a voltage drop).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a power and back
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the power button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the power button on the faceplate a
second time to turn the screen on.
Push the back button on the faceplate to exit out of a menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Customer Programmable Features — 5.0 Settings
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driving
Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore
Settings and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE:
• Only one category may be selected at a time.
• The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any
changes are made.
Uconnect 5.0 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu or press the X button on the
touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Pressing
the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Brightness With Headlights On With Headlights Off
NOTE:
To make changes to the “Brightness” setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be
in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Lan-
guage” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units — If Equipped Distance Consumption Temperature
NOTE: When selecting the “Units” setting, the changes can be made to the Distance (mi, km), Fuel Consumption
(MPG if set to mi, L/100 km or km/L if set to km), and Temperature (°C, °F).
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
NOTE: Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the displaying of the Trip B on the instrument cluster display.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response
Length
Brief Long
Show Command List Never With Help Always
NOTE: This Setting will display the possible options while in a voice session.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time And For-
mat — If Equipped
12h 24h AM PM
Show Time Statues
— If Equipped
On Off
Set Date Day Month
NOTE:
By selecting this Setting, the day and month can be updated. The selectable days range from 1–31 (depending on
month). The selectable months consist of Jan/Feb/March/April/May/June/July/Aug/Sept/Oct/Nov/Dec.
Sync Time — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When this setting is selected, the time will set automatically based upon GPS location.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Rear Backup Camera Ac-
tive Guide Lines — If Equipped
NOTE: The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with
active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the
steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is
running.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
NOTE: When this Setting is selected, the radio will remain off for the selected amount of time when the engine has
been shut off.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the
“+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” but-
tons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the set-
ting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Speaker Icon”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
— If Equipped
Off 1 2 3
NOTE: The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
Loudness — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto - On Radio On Off Last Recall
NOTE: Press the “Auto - On Radio” button on the touchscreen to set how the radio behaves when the ignition is
switched to ON.
AUX Volume Offset +–
NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX in-
put.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones/Devices List of Paired Phones/Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Radio Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “Radio Setup” button (if equipped) on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Traffic Announcement On Off
NOTE:
Allows the system to pause the radio or a media device to issue a traffic bulletin.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Alternative Frequency On Off
NOTE:
Allows the frequency to change automatically to maintain the strongest signal.
Regional On Off
NOTE: Forces the system to select from a network station when the system is present in a different region.
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default set-
tings. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the
touchscreen to exit.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Input and Auxiliary Jack is located on the
instrument panel below the Climate Controls. This feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
USB Input And AUX Jack
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio, AUX or other valid audio
sources.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control will
tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed
in the radio pre-set buttons.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not harmful to
the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it is recommended
that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
•
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Control
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost
Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the OFF position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Modes Control
Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Icon Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
System Maintenance
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at
least once a month for about ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at a Ram dealership before the
summer.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. On systems with Manual Climate
Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. At-
tempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the
LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedure” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compres-
sor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will auto-
matically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenances Procedure” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
system.
Key Features:
• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display
• Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control
• GPS Navigation (If Equipped)
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1.
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and fea-
ture compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2.
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversa-
tions are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect Voice Command
1 — Push to Mute
2 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
3—
Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
4 — Push To End Call
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Radio
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have compatible
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply”.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
Uconnect 5.0/5.0 NAV Phone
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports
reading incoming text messages only.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trade-
marks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
• Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................184
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................184
▫ Normal Starting ........................184
▫
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
. . .184
▫ Extended Park Starting ...................185
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................185
▫ After Starting..........................185
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .186
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............186
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................188
▫ Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System .....188
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission .........188
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................189
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ..........195
▫ Acceleration...........................195
▫ Traction .............................195
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ..............195
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ...................196
▫ Shallow Standing Water ..................196
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................197
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............198
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................198
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................200
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .....200
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .200
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ................201
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .............202
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...................202
5
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...........203
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light .................204
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ...........206
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ..............207
▫ Tire Markings .........................207
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............210
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ...........211
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ............212
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .........217
▫ Tire Pressure ..........................217
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ..................218
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .....219
▫ Radial Ply Tires ........................219
▫ Tire Types ............................220
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ..............221
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................221
▫ Tire Spinning .........................224
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ...................224
▫ Life Of Tire ...........................225
▫ Replacement Tires ......................225
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .........226
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ......227
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................227
▫ Treadwear ............................228
▫ Traction Grades ........................228
▫ T
emperature Grades .....................228
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) ........................229
▫ System Operation.......................231
▫ General Information ....................232
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................233
▫ 2.4L Engine ...........................233
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................233
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............233
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........234
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......234
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................234
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................235
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................235
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............236
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................236
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................237
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ................237
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................239
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............240
▫ Towing Tips ..........................247
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................248
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .248
▫ Recreational Towing — Automatic
Transmission ..........................249
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) posi-
tion and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails
to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -31°F (-35° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine
block heater has not been used. The message “plug in
engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster
when the ambient temperature is below -25°F (-32° C) at
the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait
five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver’s
side headlamp.
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
available from your authorized Mopar dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the full LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the full LOCK/OFF mode, and once
removed the transmission is locked in PARK.
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEU-
TRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer
to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this
section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles or
kilometers.
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the custom-
er’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Opera-
tion⬙ in this section for further information). Moving the
gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the DRIVE
position) activates ERS mode, displays the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts
beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the highest avail-
able gear.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3,
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake,
• Shift the transmission into PARK,
• Turn the engine OFF, and
• Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans-
mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-
pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). Normal opera-
tion will resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2
to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears.
Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward
(-) or rearward (+) will change the top available gear and it
will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear selector into
the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward (-).
The transmission will shift to the range from which the
vehicle can best be slowed down.
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning, and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of
the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid
temperature and it should be avoided when possible.
Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should be checked at every
oil change if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordi-
nate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an auto-
matic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in RE-
VERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control
System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking condi-
tions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the
light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system
reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the igni-
tion Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault
detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering effi-
ciency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the
vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system
reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing
sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These
occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is
functioning properly.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of
wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s)
and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced accel-
eration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the
intended direction of travel.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is
in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will
not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to
determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the
actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
WARNING! (Continued)
prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions re-
sulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
ties of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be ex-
ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the MAR (ON/RUN)
position for four seconds. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when
TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank above
the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC
On” mode of operation.
ESC Off Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC OFF” button.
Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is over-
come, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC
OFF” button. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu-
vers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions,
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Own-
er’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer tow-
ing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-
type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when
determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly in-
flated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
mation.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door
opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire
descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are
not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In
this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
System Operation
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. (If Equipped
with Spare Tire)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be acti-
vated, and a proper text message will be displayed when
one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. The system will automatically
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin-
guish once the updated tire pressures have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and a
proper text message will be displayed. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault
still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle can be equipped with either Tire
Service Kit, compact spare tire or regular size spare tire
(with or without original TPMS sensor).
1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if equipped): After
fixing the punctured tire with original tire sealant, the
original situation will be restored, so system will turn off
the telltale during the normal drive.
2. Compact Spare Tire – if equipped: The compact spare
wheel is not equipped with TPMS sensor. So when
mounted, during the normal drive the system will turn
on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 sec. then
remains solid). This condition persists until a wheel
equipped with original TPMS sensor has been mounted
on the vehicle.
3. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with TPMS sen-
sor): When mounted, during the normal drive the
system will turn on the telltale (flashing for approxi-
mately 75 sec. then remains solid). This condition per-
sists until a wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor
has been mounted on the vehicle. Then the system will
be restored and the telltale will turn off during the
normal drive.
4. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS sensor):
When mounted, the telltale will turn off during the
normal drive.
5. In all the above cases please check the replacement tire
inflation pressure before driving your vehicle.
6. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is driven for
short periods of time, then the system can take a while
to be restored.
NOTE: For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each tire
substitution.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of higher octane “Pre-
mium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any
benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions
to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Mal-
function Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When available, the us-
age of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is rec-
ommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for
a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close fuel
filler door.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned.
Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system
could result from using an improper fuel tank filler
tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into
the fuel system and may cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to turn on, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is supported by a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch
receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier
loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s
front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance
with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level
ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control
thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic
and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing
(load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always block
or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Trailer Electrical Connector Location
1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift-
ing does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve per-
formance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
• When using the ERS shift control, select the highest gear
that allows for adequate performance and avoids fre-
quent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear range or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission
in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............252
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............252
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .253
▫ Torque Specifications ....................253
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........255
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped .......255
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage ...................255
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED .............................258
▫ Jack Location ..........................259
▫ Removing The Spare Tire .................259
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................263
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................263
▫ Vehicles With Alloy Wheels................269
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers ........271
䡵 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES ............272
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............272
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................273
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............274
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............276
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............277
䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE ........278
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................279
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............279
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
252 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 253
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
254 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit
can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 65 mph (106 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.
Tire Service Kit Usage
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair
using the Tire Service Kit located under the passenger seat.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4” (6 mm) can be repaired; the kit
can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove the
foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the
clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Power Plug (Located Behind Storage Door)
4 — Power Button
5 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 255
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
sources.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket.
Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.
The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air
will inflate the tire.
256 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached,
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle
30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the
sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If
the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have
the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized
dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that a tire has
been treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
date at your authorized dealer.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 257
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and
serious injury or death.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
258 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
The jack and tools are stowed under the driver’s front seat.
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. Attach the wrench handle to the winch exten-
sion.
Jack/Tools Location
Jack Tools
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
4 — Bolt Install Wrench
5 — Wheel Chock
6 — Jack
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 259
2. To access the winch mechanism open the rear doors of
the vehicle to expose the winch mechanism access cover.
Remove the access cover and install the winch extension
into the winch mechanism.
3. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
Winch Location
Jack Tools
1 — Winch Extension
2 — Wrench Handle
260 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
5. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer
from the wheel.
Spare Tire Retainer Nut
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 261
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Lifting Spare Tire
Retainer
262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-
ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in
the vehicle when the vehicle is being
jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
• The stowed spare tire should always be checked for
security by pushing on it with your hand , at the
location under the rear bumper, behind the vehicle.
The spare tire should not move when fully secured
by the winch under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts with the
wrench handle by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of
the vehicle body.
NOTE: Place the jack underneath the jack engagement
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jacking Locations
Jack Engaged To Body Flange
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
3. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged in the described location.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right
until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
Front Jacking Location Engaged
Rear Jacking Location Engaged
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug bolts
using the bolt install wrench.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug bolt torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
Mounting Spare Tire
268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
10. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Refer to “Vehicles With Alloy Wheels” in this
section for instructions on stowing alloy wheels.
11. Stow the jack and tools under the driver’s seat.
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure, as required.
13. When you place the spare tire back on the winch or if
you carry the tire in need of repair on the winch,
always check that the tire is properly secured under the
vehicle by pushing on the stowed tire under the rear
bumper at the back of the vehicle. If the tire has motion
when pushed, use the tools to retighten the winch until
a loud click is heard.
Vehicles With Alloy Wheels
For stowing a damaged tire on vehicles with alloy wheels,
remove the adapter bracket and bolts from the storage bag
in the glove compartment and follow the steps below:
1. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer between the
spring and the flange of the bracket (The adapter
bracket is sold separately through the dealer).
Adapter/Spacer
1 — Adapter
2 — Plastic Spacer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269
2. The plastic fin must be directed downwards and per-
fectly coincide with the flange cut part; fit the bracket in
the adapter, fold the bracket up and secure it to the
adapter with the fastening knob.
3. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted adapter
on the inner part of the rim, using the supplied bolts
fasten the wheel to the adapter using the bolt install
wrench.
4. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle.
5. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise until the wheel
is properly stowed under the vehicle and until the
wench makes three audible noises.
6. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to confirm
that it is secure. The tire should not move. If the tire is
still loose and/or three audible noises are not heard,
place and secure damaged wheel into the vehicle and
seek dealer assistance for the winch mechanism.
This is for temporary use only.
Adapter/Bracket
1 — Adapter
2 — Fastening Knob
Alloy Wheel Mounting
270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel.
Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
3.
Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the
cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end
of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6.
Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while holding at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Bolt
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alter-
nator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protec-
tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
battery post.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
(Continued)
Positive Battery Post
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE,
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount
of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck. And do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Ve-
hicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the gear selector boot from the center console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into the gear
selector override access hole (at the right front corner of
the gear selector assembly), then push and hold the
override release lever down. While holding the override
release lever down, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
Gear Selector Boot Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position. To remove the key manually, proceed as
follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in
the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the cargo
box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of
the travel position, then lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and
with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.
7.
Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column cover.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact your authorized dealer to have
the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would like to
proceed in performing the reinstall procedure special
attention must be paid to the correct coupling of the
clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise might be
heard due to incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) func-
tion.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
Release Tab Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ...........283
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .284
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................284
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............285
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................285
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ...................286
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................286
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .............286
▫ Engine Oil ...........................287
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................289
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................290
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................290
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............291
▫ Body Lubrication ......................292
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................293
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................294
▫ Exhaust System ........................294
▫ Cooling System ........................296
▫ Brake System .........................300
▫ Power Steering Fluid ....................302
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................302
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ............................304
䡵 FUSES ................................309
▫ Underhood Fuses .......................310
▫ Interior Fuses..........................312
▫ Central
Unit Fuse Panel ..................314
7
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE .....................316
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ...................316
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................317
▫ Exterior Bulbs .........................317
▫ Interior Bulbs..........................319
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................322
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS .322
▫ Engine ..............................322
▫ Chassis .............................324
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diag-
nostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the perfor-
mance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will
turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle
will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler
cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “Check fuel
cap” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in ”Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the
problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going
to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing proce-
dure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum In-
stitute (API). The manufacturer only rec-
ommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-
fine HFO that is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Wiper Service Position
If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (In the
event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed as directed:
1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFF
position.
2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then to STOP.
3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within two
minutes move the right stalk upward, into the unstable
(“anti-panic”) position, for at least half of a second. The
windshield wiper then executes part of a stroke; at each
command, approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke
is triggered.
NOTE: The previous operation can be repeated up to three
times. In order to move the blades to the most suitable
position.
4. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed with the
required operation.
5. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contact
with the windshield.
6. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning the
ignition to MAR-ON.
NOTE: Do not operate the screen wiper with the blades
lifted from the windshield.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breath-
ing it can make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety
Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
(Continued)
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact your local autho-
rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
(Continued)
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
The image on the coolant system pres-
sure cap is a reminder that the radiator
contains hot engine coolant under pres-
sure.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
diately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MIN” and “MAX” marks.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
Power Steering Fluid
Check the fluid level with the vehicle on flat ground and
engine cold. Fluid should be between MIN and MAX
references on the reservoir body.
The level may go over the MAX line when oil is hot.
If topping off is required, make sure the oil you use is
approved. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts”
in the section for further information.
WARNING!
Because it is flammable, do not allow the power
steering fluid to come into contact with hot engine
parts
NOTE: Power steering fluid consumption is very low. If
you need to top off your fluid often and multiple times
have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in
snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal
in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle
is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
CAUTION! (Continued)
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently dam-
age this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: Power washing is not allowed inside the vehicle
(both passenger and cargo area).
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reduc-
ing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road
dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrost-
ers or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the ele-
ments.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
cloth until all residue is removed.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, remove fasteners and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding
to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange – Rear Power Windows, Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats
(If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Rear Power Windows, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
F02 30 Amp Green – Fog Lamps, Front Heated Seats (If Equipped)
Front Distribution Unit
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Secondary Loads ECM
F14 – 15 Amp Blue High Beam
F16 – 5 Amp Tan ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17 – 25 Amp Clear ECM Power Loads
F18 – 5 Amp Tan ECM Load, Main Relay
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 – 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering Angle Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue 2nd Instrument Panel Power Outlet
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V
F86 – 15 Amp Blue IP Power Outlet 12V
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown External Mirror Defrost
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F53 5 Amp Beige KL 30 (+30) - IPC
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Doors Locking
F36 10 Amp Red KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC, Radio
F43 15 Amp Blue Bi-Directional Washer Pump
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Windows
F50 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment Command, HVAC, RVC,
HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch (N.O.), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, ECM Backlighting, TTM
F31 5 Amp Beige KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Windows
Central Unit Fuse Panel
The central power fuse panel is located on the driver’s side
under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Cover
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Passenger
F2 10 Amp Red Front Heated Seat Driver
F3 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Driver side
F4 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Window Passenger side
F5 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps
Fuse Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lamps Bulb Number
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Exterior Bulbs
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Headlamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Front
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer upper
headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket.
4. Rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in
place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Parking And Daytime Running Lights
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer lower
headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not ser-
viced separately. See your authorized dealer for replace-
ment of these lights.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
The rear light clusters contain taillight, brake light, direc-
tion indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs. To access
the light clusters, proceed as follows:
1. Open the rear doors. or liftgate
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp assembly.
3. Remove the screws and separate the backplate from the
lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows:
Third Brake Light (Center Mount)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two fastening
screws and extract the cluster.
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber plugs,
remove retaining tabs and extract the cluster.
3. For versions with high roof and swing doors, remove
the pressure-fit plastic guard and rubber cap using a
screwdriver, release the retaining tags as shown in the
figure and remove the unit.
4.
Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.
License Plate Lights
Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:
1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the lens by
lifting to the left.
2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the side
contacts; insert the new bulbs and make sure they are
correctly clamped between these contacts.
Interior Bulbs
Dome Lamp With Spot Lights
To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. Remove dome lamp by depressing the tabs located by
the arrows, using a suitable tool.
2. Open protective cover.
Dome Lamp Assembly
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
3. Replace the bulbs releasing them from the side contacts
making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured
between the contacts.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it back into its
housing, making sure that it locks into place.
Rear Roof Lamp
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Remove roof lamp by depressing the tabs located by the
arrows, using a suitable tool.
2. Open the cover.
Dome Lamp
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Bulbs
Roof Lamp
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Replace the bulb releasing them from the side contacts
making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured
between the contacts.
4. Close the protective cover and reposition it back into its
housing, making sure that it locks into place.
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
1 — Cover
Roof Lamp (Reverse Side)
1 — Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the re-
quirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling sys-
tem in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4.
The fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material Standard
MS-11655.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extended engine idle time,
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
in “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350 hours of engine
run time or twelve months, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominantly at idle, or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
326 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses,
lines and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 327
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pul-
ley, and replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. * X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Change brake fluid every two years.** X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.*** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
* Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if
operated in dusty and off road environment.
** The brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This
interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
*** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
328 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 329
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................332
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............332
▫ Prepare A List .........................332
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............332
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................332
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ............333
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........333
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................333
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........333
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................334
▫ Service Contract .......................334
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............335
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................335
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............335
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .335
▫ In Canada ............................336
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............336
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
332 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 333
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
334 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 335
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts
and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it
easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests, and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
336 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............297
Additives, Fuel ............................235
AirBag..................................40
Air Bag Operation .........................42
Driver Knee Air Bag .......................43
Enhanced Accident Response ................279
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................279
If A Deployment Occurs ....................47
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................42
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............49
Transporting Pets .........................68
Air Bag Light ...........................71, 136
Air Bag Maintenance .........................49
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......290
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................291
Air Conditioning Filter.......................172
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............171, 173
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............291, 292
Air Conditioning System .....................291
Air Filter ................................290
Air Pressure, Tires ..........................218
Alarm (Security Alarm) .......................14
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .................14
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................296, 322
Disposal ...............................299
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................200
Appearance Care...........................304
Ashtray .................................110
Audio Systems (Radio).......................164
Auto Down Power Windows ...................22
Automatic Transaxle ......................11,184
Automatic Transmission ...............186, 188, 303
Adding Fluid ........................303, 324
Fluid And Filter Changes ...................303
Fluid Change ...........................303
Fluid Level Check .....................302, 303
Fluid Type ..........................302, 324
Special Additives .........................303
Auto
Up Power Windows .....................23
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........108
Axle Lubrication ...........................324
Battery...............................137, 290
Charging System Light ....................137
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................16
Belts, Seat.................................70
Body Builders Guide..........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................292
B-Pillar Location ...........................212
338 INDEX
Brake Assist System .........................201
Brake Fluid ...............................324
Brake, Parking.............................198
Brake System ..........................200, 300
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................200
Fluid Check .........................301, 324
Master Cylinder .........................301
Parking ...............................198
Warning Light ...........................139
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................188
Bulb Replacement .......................316, 317
Bulbs, Light ............................73, 316
Camera, Rear .............................107
Capacities, Fluid ...........................322
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................236
Oil (Engine) .........................283, 288
Power Steering ..........................198
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................298
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................70, 236
Cargo Tie-Downs...........................113
Car Washes...............................304
Cellular Phone ............................166
Certification Label ..........................237
Chains, Tire ..............................226
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................208
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .285
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................69
Checks, Safety .............................69
Child Restraint .............................50
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................53
Child Restraints ..........................50
Child Seat Installation ......................62
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .........59
Infants And Child Restraints .................52
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ..............57
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ........55
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........52
Seating Positions ..........................54
Cigar
Lighter..............................110
Clean Air Gasoline .........................233
Cleaning
Wheels ................................305
Climate Control............................166
Manual ................................166
Cold Weather Operation......................184
Compact Spare Tire .........................222
Contract, Service ...........................334
10
INDEX 339
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............298
Cooling System ............................296
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................297
Coolant Capacity .........................322
Coolant Level ...........................299
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................299
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................296
Inspection ..........................296, 299
Points To Remember ......................299
Pressure Cap ............................298
Radiator Cap ...........................298
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........296, 322
Corrosion Protection ........................304
Cruise Light ..............................149
Cupholders ...............................110
Customer Assistance ........................332
Customer Programmable Features...............152
Daytime Running Lights ......................92
Dealer Service .............................286
Defroster, Rear Window ......................115
Defroster, Windshield ........................71
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................284
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................287
Power Steering ..........................198
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................276
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................299
Door Ajar ................................138
Door Ajar Light............................138
Door Locks................................18
Doors....................................18
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................195
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........108
Electric Rear Window Defrost ..................115
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................80
Electronic Brake Control System ................200
Brake Assist System .......................201
Electr
onic Range Select (ERS)..................194
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)................206
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..........99
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............203
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........135
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................274
Jump Starting ...........................272
340 INDEX
Towing ................................276
Emission Control System Maintenance............285
Engine ..................................283
Air Cleaner .............................290
Block Heater ............................186
Break-In Recommendations ..................68
Checking Oil Level .......................287
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................322
Cooling ...............................296
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................70, 236
Fails To Start ............................185
Flooded, Starting .........................185
Fuel Requirements ........................233
Jump Starting ...........................272
Oil ...............................287, 322
Oil Filler Cap ........................283, 288
Oil Filter ...............................289
Oil Selection .........................288, 322
Oil Synthetic ............................289
Overheating ............................252
Starting ...............................184
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................288
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................288
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............279
Ethanol..................................233
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................70, 236
Exhaust System .........................70, 294
Exterior Lights .............................73
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................290
Air Conditioning .........................172
Engine Oil ..........................289, 322
Engine Oil Disposal .......................289
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................252
Turn Signal ..........................73, 148
Flash-To-Pass ..............................
92
Flooded Engine Starting ......................185
Fluid, Brake ..............................324
Fluid Capacities............................322
Fluid Leaks ...............................73
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................301
Engine Oil .............................287
Power Steering ..........................198
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ............322
Fog Lights ................................93
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................252
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................274
10
INDEX 341
Fuel ....................................233
Additives ..............................235
Clean Air ..............................233
Ethanol ...............................233
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................236
Gasoline ...............................233
Light .................................141
Materials Added .........................235
Methanol ..............................233
Octane Rating ........................233, 322
Requirements ...........................233
Specifications ...........................322
Tank Capacity ...........................322
Fuses ...................................309
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .................236, 285
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................233
Gasoline (Fuel) ............................233
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................233
Gear Ranges ..............................189
Gear Select Lever Override....................277
General Information .....................166, 232
Glass Cleaning ............................308
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................238, 240
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...............238, 240
Guide, Body Builders .........................6
GVWR ..................................238
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................195
Hazard Warning Flasher......................252
Headlights ................................91
Cleaning ...............................308
Passing ................................92
Head Restraints ............................86
Heated Mirrors ............................115
Heated Seats...............................85
Heater, Engine Block ........................186
Hill Start Assist ............................202
Hitches
T
railer Towing ...........................242
Holder, Cup ..............................110
Hood Release ..............................89
Ignition ..................................11
Key ...................................11
Ignition Key Removal ........................11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................13
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................78
342 INDEX
Instrument Cluster ...................122, 134, 148
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ..................124
Instrument Panel And Controls.................121
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................308
Interior Appearance Care .....................307
Introduction ................................4
iPod Control ..............................164
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................164
Bluetooth Streaming Audio .................164
Jump Starting .............................272
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....16
Key-In Reminder............................12
Key, Replacement ...........................13
Keys ....................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................13
Lane Change Assist ..........................93
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........................29
Latches ..................................73
Lead Free Gasoline .........................233
Leaks, Fluid ...............................73
Life Of Tires ..............................225
Light Bulbs ............................73, 316
Lights .................................73, 91
AirBag .............................71, 136
Brake Assist Warning ......................204
Brake Warning ..........................139
Bulb Replacement ........................317
Cruise ................................149
Engine Temperature Warning ................134
Exterior ................................73
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................252
Low Fuel ..............................141
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........146
Park ...............................92, 149
Passing ................................92
Seat Belt Reminder .......................136
Service ................................317
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............143
T
raction Control .........................204
Turn Signal ..........................73, 148
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .134, 148
Loading Vehicle ........................237, 239
Capacities ..............................239
Tires..................................212
Locks....................................18
Door ..................................18
10
INDEX 343
Lubrication, Body ..........................292
Lug Nuts ................................253
Maintenance Free Battery .....................290
Maintenance Procedures......................286
Maintenance Schedule .......................326
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .146, 285
Manual, Service............................336
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .....................301
Methanol ................................233
Mirrors ..................................78
Electric Powered ..........................80
Electric Remote ...........................80
Exterior Folding ..........................79
Outside ................................79
Rearview ...............................78
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................229
Mopar Parts ...........................286, 335
MTBE/ETBE ..............................233
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................91
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...................68
Occupant Restraints .........................26
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............233, 322
Oil Change Indicator ........................130
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...................130
Oil, Engine............................287, 322
Capacity ...............................322
Change Interval .........................288
Checking ..............................287
Dipstick ...............................287
Disposal ...............................289
Filter ..............................289, 322
Filter Disposal ...........................289
Identification Logo .......................288
Materials Added To .......................289
Pressure Warning Light ....................137
Recommendation .....................288, 322
Synthetic ..............................289
V
iscosity ...........................288, 322
Oil Filter, Change ..........................289
Oil Filter, Selection..........................289
Oil Pressure Light ..........................137
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................284
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................79
Overheating, Engine ........................252
344 INDEX
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........4,336
Paint Care................................304
Parking Brake .............................198
ParkSense System, Rear ......................102
Passing Light ..............................92
Personal Settings ...........................152
Pets .....................................68
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........212, 213
Power
Mirrors ................................80
Steering ............................197, 198
Windows ...............................21
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................35
Preparation For Jacking ......................263
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............................36
Radial Ply Tires ............................219
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............298
Radio Frequency
General Information .......................17
Radio Operation ...........................166
Rear Camera ..............................107
Rear ParkSense System ......................102
Recreational Towing.........................248
Reformulated Gasoline.......................233
Refrigerant ...............................292
Reminder, Seat Belt ..........................28
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........165
Replacement Bulbs .........................316
Replacement Keys ...........................13
Replacement Parts ..........................286
Replacement Tires ..........................225
Reporting Safety Defects .....................335
Restraint, Head.............................86
Restraints, Child ............................50
Rotation, Tires.............................227
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................70
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................72
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................335
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..........................70
Safety Information, Tire ......................207
Safety
Tips ................................69
Schedule, Maintenance.......................326
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .......34
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............36
Energy Management Feature .................36
10
INDEX 345
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................32
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................29
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................33
Pregnant Women .........................35
Seat Belt Pretensioner ......................36
Seat Belt Reminder ........................28
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................308
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................28
Seat Belts ..............................28, 70
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ....................34
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..........34
Child Restraint ...........................50
Front Seat .........................28, 29, 32
Inspection ..............................70
Operating Instructions ......................32
Pregnant Women .........................35
Pretensioners ............................36
Rear Seat ...............................29
Reminder ..............................136
Untwisting Procedure ......................33
Seats ....................................81
Adjustment .............................81
Heated .................................85
Security Alarm .............................14
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............322
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................13
Service Assistance ..........................332
Service Contract ...........................334
Service Manuals ...........................336
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ....................188
Shift Lever Override ........................277
Shoulder Belts .............................29
Signals, Turn ...........................73, 148
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................226
Snow Tires ...............................220
Spare Tire .........................221, 222, 223
Spark Plugs ..............................322
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................322
Oil...................................322
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................102
Cancel ................................100
Speed
Control (Cruise Control)..................99
Starting .................................184
Automatic Transmission ....................184
Cold Weather ...........................184
Engine Fails To Start ......................185
346 INDEX
Steering
Power .............................197, 198
Tilt Column .............................98
Wheel, Tilt ..............................98
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................165
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .165
Storage ..................................316
Storage, Vehicle ........................172, 316
Storing Your Vehicle ........................316
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag...........40
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................289
Telescoping Steering Column ...................98
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ......................113
Tilt Steering Column .........................98
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........212, 213
Tire Markings .............................207
Tires...........................72, 217, 221, 227
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................225
Air Pressure .........................212, 217
Chains ................................226
Compact Spare ..........................222
General Information ...................217, 221
High Speed .............................219
Inflation Pressures ........................218
Life Of Tires ............................225
Load Capacity .......................212, 214
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............229
Pressure Warning Light ....................143
Quality Grading .........................227
Radial ................................219
Replacement ............................225
Rotation ...............................227
Safety .............................207, 217
Sizes .................................208
Snow Tires .............................220
Spare Tire ..........................221, 223
Spinning ...............................224
Trailer Towing ...........................244
T
read Wear Indicators .....................224
Tire Safety Information.......................207
Tire Service Kit ............................255
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................242
Towing ..................................239
Disabled Vehicle .........................276
Guide .................................242
Recreational ............................248
Weight ................................242
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............248
Traction .................................195
10
INDEX 347
Traction Control ...........................202
Trailer Towing.............................239
Cooling System Tips ......................248
Hitches ................................242
Minimum Requirements ....................243
Tips ..................................247
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................242
Wiring ................................245
Trailer Towing Guide ........................242
Trailer Weight .............................242
Transaxle
Automatic ...........................11,184
Transmission..............................188
Automatic .......................186, 188, 302
Maintenance ............................302
Transporting Pets ...........................68
Tread Wear Indicators .......................224
Trip Computer ............................131
Turn Signals ..............................148
Uconnect Voice Command ....................174
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................227
Unleaded Gasoline .........................233
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................33
Vehicle Certification Label ....................237
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............6
Vehicle Loading .....................214, 237, 239
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................7
Vehicle Storage .........................172, 316
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................288
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................174
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................335
Washers, Windshield......................96, 294
Washing Vehicle ...........................304
Water
Driving Through .........................195
Wheel And Wheel Trim ......................305
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................305
W
ind Buffeting .............................24
Window Fogging...........................172
Windows .................................21
Power .................................21
Windshield Defroster.........................71
Windshield Washers ......................96, 294
Fluid .................................294
348 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
17VM-126-AD
